Keyboard Part Number List
3361 keyboards found/on record (showing page 8/14 - results 1751 to 2000)...
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92F6273 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3201 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 4693 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4694 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4800 SurePOS 700 Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Litho Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
Layout/LanguageLayout/Language The original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian/French |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Key-lock Magnetic stripe reader |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$625 USD in 1993 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 4694 POS Terminal Model 001 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-150) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92F6275 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
93F1925 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3202 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Litho Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Key-lock Magnetic stripe reader |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$625 USD in 1993 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Made for the IBM 4693 POS System, 4694 POS System and SurePOS 700 Series |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1996-9CR-117 Doc: IBM 4694 POS Terminal Model 001 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-150) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92F6278 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3200 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M9 RANPOS Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 4693 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4694 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4800 SurePOS 700 Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Litho Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
117 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazilian/Portuguese |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Key-lock Magnetic stripe reader |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$625 USD in 1993 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 4694 POS Terminal Model 001 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-150) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92F6290 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
3323 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M11 RPOS Modifiable Layout Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 4694 POS Terminal (IBM 4690 family) IBM 4800 SurePOS 700 Series |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch, XAC |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (early or late POS type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White/Litho Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
SIO via RS-485 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style detachable 8-pin SDL to 8-pin SDL cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
133 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size matrix |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Key-lock Magnetic stripe reader |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$645 USD in 1993 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 4694 POS Terminal Model 001 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-150) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G2838 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available for IBM ValuePoint for AS/400 as an alternative to P/N 71G4644 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ValuePoint for AS/400 Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-315) [source: IBM] Web: https://www.reddit.com/r/MechanicalKeyboards/comments/171xeyt/my_father_had_kept_these_as_backups_figured_you/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4617 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4618 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium/French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4619 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1378702 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Bulgarian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=051a6b27ca69cb6f |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4620 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Czech |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4621 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4622 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4623 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish/Finnish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4624 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4625 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4626 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4627 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4628 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hungarian ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4629 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Icelandic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4630 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4631 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4632 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Polish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4633 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4634 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Romanian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4635 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Russian/Cyrillic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4636 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Serbian/Cyrillic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] Web: https://www.reddit.com/r/modelm/comments/14c0ohz/ibm_model_m_1993_rubber_dome_w_cyrillic_font/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4637 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Slovakian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4638 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4639 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium/Dutch |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4640 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss-French/Swiss-German |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4642 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4643 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1378725 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4644 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
71G4646 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1995-EQT-101 Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G4647 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1378726 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Yugoslavian/Latin ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] Web: https://www.njuskalo.hr/tipkovnica-mis/retro-tipkovnica-ibm-model-m-71g4647-slicna-mehanickoj-ps-2-ps2-oglas-21750829 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
73G8306 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
61G2901 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
9035 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$185 USD in 1993 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Quiet Touch Keyboard with Trackpoint II, IBM Quiet Touch Numeric Keypad and IBM Enhanced Mouse Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-346) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/4b76.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
73G9775 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
61G2903 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
9131 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1993 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") to modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
18 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$35 USD in 1993 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Quiet Touch Keyboard with Trackpoint II, IBM Quiet Touch Numeric Keypad and IBM Enhanced Mouse Brief Description of Announcement, Charges, and Availability (#193-346) [source: IBM] Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/4b76.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397950 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model F 5291/5292 Terminal Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Bigfoot |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 5291 Model 2 Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM, Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM capacitive buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Triple-setting riser feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM 5291/5292-specific host-drives-capsense |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed DA-15 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Some examples were in fact produced by IBM but later remanufactured by Lexmark between 1994 and 1996 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1379740 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M-based Typewriter Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
80 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220616194933/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/185104389907 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1396000 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1393398 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M-based Typewriter Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
67 |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220616195515/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/185104400168 Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=c7859ee6571b3432 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393620 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 3 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
103 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
ES ISO (ASCII-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Comes with specific ASCII character sublegends on the numeric keypad keycaps |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20230429173315/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/204312421843?orig_cvip=true&nordt=true&rt=nc |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1394229 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3471 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) IBM 3472 InfoWindow Display Station (IBM 3270 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 3 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Thai ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Combined F1/F13 to F12/F24 function key row |
| CreditsCredits A reserved special acknowledgement to anyone who has helped me with research through social media, email or via the P/N submission form for this keyboard part number. |
u/mcmaxmcmc |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397979 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1390572 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type II 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battleship |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3196 Display Station (IBM 5250 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 3 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (240) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
"Cmdxx" command key block, seems to be a very late replacement for the original P/N 1390572 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=b9369ef0079cd213 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1369050 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
New Dell rectangle |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1994-dell-model-m-new-logo-1369050-06-apr-94/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1378160 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
1378161 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Ambra isosceles trapezium |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1378491 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
New Dell rectangle |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
104 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazilian Portuguese ABNT2 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20240419022704/https://www.ebay.com/itm/196352672486 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1397711 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
New Dell rectangle |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220318004032/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/125205138247 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399002 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1396718 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1994-ibm-model-m-1399002-manufactured-by-lexmark-29-mar-94-new-102-key-spanish-extra-replacement-us-keys-no-cable/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399975 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
4501213, 5091213 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1994-ibm-model-m-1399975-14-dec-94-made-by-lexmark-102-key-iso-arabic-new-lexmark-documentation/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
52G7980 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Advertised as an option for various IBM ThinkPad computers of the mid '90s |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1994-ibm-model-m-52g7980-manufactured-by-lexmark-for-ibm-05-mar-94/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
52G9701 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
92F0333 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 6381 PS/ValuePoint IBM 6382 ValuePoint Performance IBM 6384 ValuePoint Performance IBM 6387 ValuePoint Performance |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
LA Spanish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220727163348/https://www.ebay.com/itm/374189250200 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G3571 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sold under IBM Easy OPTIONS branding |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G3974 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
61G3976 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
104 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazilian ABNT2 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220331204318/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/275234624304 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G2383 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
82G3278 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1378275 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM RS/6000 7043 43P Series Service Guide (#SA38-0512-03) [source: IBM] Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1995-ibm-model-m-82g2383-made-by-lexmark-17-feb-95/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92G7453 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN or Grey fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sold under OPTIONS by IBM brand |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1994-EEP-101 ASK: SNKB-M1995-EEP-101-A Doc: Options by IBM: Overview (#194-052) [source: IBM] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=b928a73482e468e6 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8184692 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Soft Touch greased membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Was available as an option for the IBM 7006 RS/6000 Graphics Workstation |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM 7006 Graphics Workstation Service Guide (#SA23-2719-01) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1369969 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399361 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Russian (Cyrillic) ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://deskthority.net/wiki/IBM_part_numbers#1399361 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
73G4614 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
8125460 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO (PC-style) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://www.9999hp.net/keyboard/temp/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
71G6120 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard with Expanded Border |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
GTSI DeskTop rectangle |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220419195130/https://www.ebay.com/itm/304451638126 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6306 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
84G6309 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian ISO |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Can be paired with numeric keypad P/N 84G6310 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?p=418443#p418443 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1369907 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M5-2 Trackball Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
New Dell rectangle |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
25mm trackball |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20230730154624/https://www.ebay.com/itm/334950146855 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1378210 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M5-2 Trackball Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
25mm trackball |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Has a groove for an IBM oval badge |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5728 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
84G5896 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1994-61K-85 Web: https://www.worthpoint.com/worthopedia/ibm-thinkpad-360cs-dock-station-type-1791204876 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1403740 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type VI Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
82 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1994-61K-82 ASK: SNKB-M1994-61K-82-A |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1378192 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M13 TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
N/A |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
13H6705 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1404838 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M13 TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black coiled-style fixed dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
FRU part number for the Maxi Switch variant is 13H6710, sold under the OPTIONS by IBM brand |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1997-13M-101 Doc: Options by IBM: TrackPoint II Keyboard (Raven Black) -- PS Style (13H6705) (#194-361) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3281 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
82G3282 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
9081 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M13 TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Also branded as IBM Enhanced Keyboard with TrackPoint II, sold as part of the IBM Select-A-Keyboard scheme |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PS/2 76 and 77 Family of Systems and Options (#194-206) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM PC 300 Series Pentium Systems Announcement Letter (#194-347) [source: IBM] Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] Web: https://phosphorglow.net/2014/05/09/82g3281-m13trackpoint-ii-february-17th-1994/ Web: https://imgur.com/a/YpKgN |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3285 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
82G3286 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M13 TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian/French ISO |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=6d77e6b0608384ad |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
13H6689 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M15 Adjustable Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Multi-setting ergonomic feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
89 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/options-for-ibm-model-m15-ergonomic-new-02-nov-94/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1428401 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M15 Adjustable Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Multi-setting ergonomic feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
89 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1995-lexmark-model-m15-ergonomic-1428401-external-num-pad-22-nov-1995/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1403599 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M15 Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Multi-setting ergonomic feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
66G0507 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
5576-B01 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Mitsumi |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Mitsumi KPQ-type membrane buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
106 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://mitateda.blog.fc2.com/blog-entry-39.html |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92G7454 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
92G7454 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed DIN (180) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Sold under the OPTIONS by IBM brand |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Options by IBM: Overview (#194-052) [source: IBM] Web: https://www.worthpoint.com/worthopedia/vintage-ibm-model-mechanical-keyboard-3874138798 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1403213 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type III Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q1 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1995-09-19 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: US - IBM RS/6000 Model N40 Sales Manual (#7007-N40) [source: IBM] Web: https://ardent-tool.com/RS6000/7007/7007-n40.html#Keyboard |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
66G8362 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1403247 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
5576-C01 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M 5576-C01 TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 5538-W Personal System/55E (i486SX-33) IBM 5538-Y Personal System/55E (i486DX-33 & VGA) IBM 5538-Z Personal System/55E (i486DX-33 & SVGA) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
104 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japanese JIS |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1994-C01-106 Web: https://www.ardent-tool.com/sandy55/5576/5576.html |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
66G8363 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
5576-C01 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M 5576-C01 TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 5538-W Personal System/55E (i486SX-33) IBM 5538-Y Personal System/55E (i486DX-33 & VGA) IBM 5538-Z Personal System/55E (i486DX-33 & SVGA) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
IBM U.S. |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q1 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM grey oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
104 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japanese JIS |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.ardent-tool.com/sandy55/5576/5576.html |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92G9006 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
92G9007 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type III 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM Quiet Touch rubber domes |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q2 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1997-04-22 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 3 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/a312.htm Web: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Q8Hb1A6rwo8&t=125s |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
73G3412 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
73G3394 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type IV Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q2 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
81 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 1 (#S82G-1501-01) [source: IBM] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/wiki?id=modelm6#TP510 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
232010-001 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type VI Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
82 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Lexmark part number 1378887 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://youtu.be/CKNEFcI0oQI?t=11 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
232010-004 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type VI Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German ISO |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Lexmark part number 1378889 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1994-61K-83 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
232010-008 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type VI Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
83 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss-German ISO |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Lexmark part number 1378897 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=11c7b1eb36ecf4fb |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8797 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
84G6495 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6445 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
84G6495 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20230501183356/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/266098591166 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6475 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
84G6496 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1995-61K-86 Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6497 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German (Black) |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6498 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6499 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6500 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6501 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6502 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6503 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6504 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6505 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6506 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6507 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6508 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6509 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6510 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6511 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6512 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6513 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin American |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6514 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6515 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japanese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3576 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6001 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced Industrial Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Unicomp |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$248 USD in 1997 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Despite being "industrial" this keyboard is pearl white, availability for order with IBM Industrial Computers was withdrawn effective 8th November 1994, this part number replaced 06H3830 effective 27th November 1996 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: Withdrawal: Selected IBM Industrial Products (#194-391) [source: IBM] Doc: Price Changes: Selected Models and Features for Data Collection and Industrial Computer Products (#A97-1438) [source: IBM] Doc: Changes to Ordering Part Numbers for Selected Industrial Computer and Data Collection Features (#A96-1430) [source: IBM] Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20231001161336/https://nwqz.yygoldk.top/index.php?main_page=product_info&products_id=45626 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1392011 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S52G-9971-02) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1393866 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Cyrillic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Personal System/2 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S52G-9971-02) [source: Ardent Tool] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3295 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
82G3278 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1378275 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1994 Q4 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Available as an alternate keyboard for the IBM PC 300 Series |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1995-EEP-101 Doc: IBM PC 300 Series Pentium Systems Announcement Letter (#194-347) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1389198 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1389199 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type I 122-key Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battleship |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM silver square badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Dual-setting riser feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 3 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (240) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin American Spanish ISO |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
"FPxx" command key block, has APL keycap sublegends |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1995-ibm-model-m122-battleship-1389198-11-15-95-with-apl-keyset-with-original-styrofoam/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1378207 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Cube Computer Corporation rectangle |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (180) cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
42H1292 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
42H1296 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
11A0205 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
KB 454 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, IBM U.K., Unicomp |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge, IBM logo across lock-light LEDs overlay |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M2002-EEP-101 Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1997-ibm-model-m-42h1292-made-by-ibm-uk-28-10-97-new/ Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1999-ibm-model-m-42h1292-made-by-ibm-uk-06-04-99/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
61G3973 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
61G3976 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1379063 |
| Known Package/Box Part NumbersKnown Package/Box Part Numbers Possible numbers assigned to the original packaging this keyboard was shipped in. |
61G3975 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
104 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazilian ABNT2 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Seems to be equivalent to P/N 61G3974 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.clickykeyboards.com/product/1995-ibm-model-m-61g3973-11-22-95-made-for-ibm-by-lexmark-103-key-iso-brazilian-portuguese-new/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G2384 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
82G3294 |
| Known Package/Box Part NumbersKnown Package/Box Part Numbers Possible numbers assigned to the original packaging this keyboard was shipped in. |
82G3292 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced PC Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220512121154/https://www.ebay.co.uk/itm/403509939110 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1399240 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1394553 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Enhanced RISC Systems Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Bull cylindrical-protruded rectangle |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Accessories & Other FeaturesAccessories & Other Features Other notable features you may want to know about such as charging cables (if keyboard is wireless), fingerprint reader, card reader, solenoid, DIP switches, etc. |
Internal speaker |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Based on an IBM RISC System/6000 Enhanced Keyboard, has Ctrl/Act key in place of the right Ctrl key |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1995-EES-101 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1369986 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://www.reddit.com/r/modelm/comments/x3g0yn/lexmark_model_m122/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
901022-50 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
LX-122-US |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Type IV 122-key Host Connected Converged Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
Battlecruiser |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lynk rectangle |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting elongated flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
122 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
120% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
ISO |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3200 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
41G3548 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Known to be used by Ford |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://deskthority.net/viewtopic.php?t=16586 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
41G3600 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Industrial Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://www.9999hp.net/keyboard/temp/ |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1395716 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Selectric Touch Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish ISO |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=7ce18ace76ae3864 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1398419 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M2 Terminal Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed modular-6P4C ("RJ-14") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Seems to be a PC-style terminal keyboard with an unusually short cable |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20220320204214/https://www.ebay.com/itm/125112840950 |
| CreditsCredits A reserved special acknowledgement to anyone who has helped me with research through social media, email or via the P/N submission form for this keyboard part number. |
Baron_On_Wings#6809 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
25H2142 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model M3" Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 3153 InfoWindow II Color ASCII Display Station (IBM 3101 family) |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 3 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed modular-8P5C ("RJ-45") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI (PC-style) |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Seemingly a PC-style terminal keyboard that's otherwise identical to the Model M2, "Model M3" designation possibly a misprint given other completely different Model M3s are known |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/e83e.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92G7455 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1398148 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M5-2 Trackball Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
25mm trackball |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
FRU per DPRS number is 13H6723 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1995-52P-101 Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/4b76.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92G7456 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M5-2 Trackball Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 (keyboard) & RS232 (mouse) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to DIN (180) & DE-9 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
25mm trackball |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
FRU per DPRS number is 13H6724 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/4b76.htm Web: https://www.worthpoint.com/worthopedia/nib-vintage-ibm-trackball-mechanical-2105693645 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
X0044 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type IV Apple Newton MessagePad Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
ABS with pad-printed legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Newton logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed LocalTalk-style mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
60% |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
61-key English or 62-key German |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1995-61K-61 ASK: SNKB-M1997-61K-61 ASK: SNKB-M1997-61K-61-A Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/articles/apple_model_m |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1403380 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M13 TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 (keyboard) & RS232 (mouse) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (180) & DE-9 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
N/A |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1995-13L-101-A |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
1428405 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M13 TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Lexmark logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 (keyboard) & RS232 (mouse) |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed DIN (180) & DE-9 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
ANSI /w Cangjie/Zhuyin |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
"Lexmark-Unicomp" FSR pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=783edf9469f00574 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
82G3283 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
82G3284 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M13 TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin/Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM PC Server 310 - FRU-P/N Cross Reference (EMEA) (#JBAR-3WDP8W) [source: kev009] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
92G7461 |
| Known Assembly Part NumbersKnown Assembly Part Numbers Possible numbers found inside this keyboard used to indicate its internal assembly and the keycaps on it. |
1379916 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M13 TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
FRU part number for the Maxi Switch variant is 13H6728, sold under OPTIONS by IBM brand |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1995-13L-101 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H4173 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
06H4842 |
| Market Model Name/Feature CodeMarket Model Name/Feature Code The consumer-friendly model number describing this keyboard as a part of a range of products, usually irrespective of target region, language or SKU. |
6045 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M13 TrackPoint II/FSR Industrial Keyboard |
| Known Host SystemsKnown Host Systems A list of known host systems this keyboard could be bundled with or at least designed specifically to operate with. This could be terminals, desktop PCs or laptops. |
IBM 7585 Industrial Computer IBM 7587 Model 1 Industrial Computer IBM 7588 Industrial Computer |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Maxi Switch, Unicomp |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM membrane buckling springs |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Industrial Grey |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge, IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style fixed dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick, "Lexmark-Unicomp" FSR pointing stick |
| Earliest Recorded PriceEarliest Recorded Price The earliest price, currency and year of record found for this keyboard part number. |
$389 USD in 1997 |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Replaced P/N 06H3836 on 27th November 1996, FRU part number for Lexmark and Unicomp made examples is 06H4173 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1998-13U-101 Doc: Changes to Ordering Part Numbers for Selected Industrial Computer and Data Collection Features (#A96-1430) [source: IBM] Doc: Price Changes: Selected Models and Features for Data Collection and Industrial Computer Products (#A97-1438) [source: IBM] Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=0214a6a8104a8c6e |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H4601 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
06H5305 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
101 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5256 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5257 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian-French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5258 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian-UK/Dutch |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5259 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Bulgarian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5260 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Czech |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5261 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5262 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5263 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish/Finnish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5264 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5265 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German 129 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5266 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5267 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5268 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hungarian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5269 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Icelandic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5270 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5271 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5272 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Polish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5273 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Polish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5274 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5275 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Romanian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5276 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Russian/Cyrillic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5277 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Serbian/Cyrillic |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5278 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Slovak |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5279 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5280 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss (French/German) |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5281 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish 179 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5282 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish 440 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5283 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
102 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5285 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Yugoslavian/Latin American |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5286 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Korean |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5287 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Thailand |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5288 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Taiwanese |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5291 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Chinese/US |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5689 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German 453 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5690 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin/Spanish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5691 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French/Canadian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
06H5692 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
"Model A" Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark (via Siam United Hi Tech) |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Unspecified, OEM-specific or misc. rubber dome implementation |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
Simple/generic IBM logo |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey straightened-style fixed PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Full-size |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Brazil/Portugal |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: http://ps-2.kev009.com/pcpartnerinfo/ctstips/f9c6.htm |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
60G0869 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M Space Saving Keyboard |
| NicknameNickname A [keyboard enthusiast] community given name for this keyboard. It can be a shortening of its name and properties, a more abstract term, a real-life reference, or metonymy. |
SSK |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| WithdrawnWithdrawn The date this keyboard part number was withdrawn from marketing. This doesn't necessarily mean production or refurbishments ended on the same date, just the keyboard was no longer being sold under normal circumstances from then on. |
1996-08-13 |
| Original KeycapsOriginal Keycaps The keyboard's original keycaps' material and text/symbol printing technique. |
PBT with dye-sublimated legends |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Pearl White |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM blue oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to PS/2 mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Replaced P/N 60G0815, some examples have also be labelled as P/N 1395100, key-switch presently unknown |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: New Unit Pack Ordering for IBM IDE Disk Drives and Other Selected K-12 Education Products Announcement (#194-419) [source: IBM] Doc: Hardware Withdrawal: Selected EduQuest Educational Computer Features -- Replacements Available (#996-203) [source: IBM] Web: https://web.archive.org/web/20230806231203/https://www.ebay.com/itm/225709352199?orig_cvip=true&nordt=true&rt=nc |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5897 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5898 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5899 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5900 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5901 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5902 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5903 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Finnish, Swedish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5904 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5905 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5906 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5907 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgium |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5908 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5909 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5910 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5911 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5912 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5913 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5914 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin American |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5915 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G5916 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japanese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G8348 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Russian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H6151 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
04H6917 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H6918 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H6919 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Latin American |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8307 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8308 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8310 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8311 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8312 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8313 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish/Finnish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8314 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8315 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8316 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8317 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8318 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8319 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8320 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8321 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8322 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Greek |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8323 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japanese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
04H8373 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss/German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
10H2601 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
04H8309 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Classic ThinkPad Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Key Tronic buckling rubber sleeves |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q1 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Assembly contracts into a smaller footprint when the host ThinkPad's lid is closed |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G2529 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
84 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Can be paired with numeric keypad P/N 84G2530 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6279 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German ISO |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Can be paired with numeric keypad P/N 84G6280 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6285 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French ISO |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Can be paired with numeric keypad P/N 84G6286 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6288 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
84G6291 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian ISO |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Can be paired with numeric keypad P/N 84G6292 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6294 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
84G6297 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK ISO |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Can be paired with numeric keypad P/N 84G6298 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1995-41K-84 Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6303 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver TrackPoint II Keyboard |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Grey coiled-style detachable 6-pin SDL to dual mini-DIN PS/2 cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
85 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish ISO |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Can be paired with numeric keypad P/N 84G6304 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G2526 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
84G2530 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") to modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
18 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-M1995-41P-18 Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6280 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") to modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
18 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6286 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") to modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
18 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6292 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") to modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
18 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6298 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") to modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
18 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
UK English |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6304 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") to modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
18 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
84G6310 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M4-1 Space Saver Numeric Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M3/M4 rod-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
Rubberised single-setting flip-out feet |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Detachable modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") to modular-10P10C ("RJ-50") cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
18 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
85G7443 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Russian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint II strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
232011-001 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type VI Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| FeetFeet The style of this keyboard's flip-out or extendable feet. If applicable, this may also state how many levels of height adjustment are available and whether the feet could be rubberised. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
US ANSI |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
"Lexmark-Unicomp" FSR pointing stick |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Lexmark part number 1428200 |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Web: https://sharktastica.co.uk/archive/view?id=5640862e4e608623 |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
79F6401 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
79F6401 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Alps KFNR "Buckling Sleeve" |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Japanese |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Also branded as the IBM ThinkPad Numeric Keypad Option |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
95F5446 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
95F5741 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Alps KFNR "Buckling Sleeve" |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian/Hebrew/UK English/US English |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Also branded as the IBM ThinkPad Numeric Keypad Option |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
ASK: SNKB-O1999-KP-17 Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
95F5466 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
95F5466 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Alps KFNR "Buckling Sleeve" |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Canadian French |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Also branded as the IBM ThinkPad Numeric Keypad Option |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
95F5467 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
95F5467 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Alps KFNR "Buckling Sleeve" |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish/Dutch/Greek/Icelandic/Norwegian/Turkish |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Also branded as the IBM ThinkPad Numeric Keypad Option |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
95F5468 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
95F5468 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Alps KFNR "Buckling Sleeve" |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish/Finnish |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Also branded as the IBM ThinkPad Numeric Keypad Option |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
95F5711 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
95F5711 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Alps KFNR "Buckling Sleeve" |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss French |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Also branded as the IBM ThinkPad Numeric Keypad Option |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
95F5715 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
95F5715 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Alps KFNR "Buckling Sleeve" |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss German |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Also branded as the IBM ThinkPad Numeric Keypad Option |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
95F6313 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
95F6313 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Alps KFNR "Buckling Sleeve" |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Also branded as the IBM ThinkPad Numeric Keypad Option |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
95F6314 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
95F6314 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Alps KFNR "Buckling Sleeve" |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Also branded as the IBM ThinkPad Numeric Keypad Option |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
95F6315 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
95F6315 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Alps KFNR "Buckling Sleeve" |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Also branded as the IBM ThinkPad Numeric Keypad Option |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
95F6316 |
| FRU Part NumberFRU Part Number Field Replaceable Unit The number used to relate and indicate compatible but otherwise potentially different keyboards that could replace this one. |
95F6316 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Misc. Keypad |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Alps Electric |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
Alps KFNR "Buckling Sleeve" |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q2 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
IBM black oval badge |
| ProtocolProtocol The protocol(s) this keyboard can use to speak to the host computer (eg, scancode sets). |
IBM scancode set 2 |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Black straightened-style fixed PS/2-like combined keypad/mouse mini-DIN cable |
| Key CountKey Count The number of keys that this keyboard originally had. |
17 |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Keypad |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Additional NotesAdditional Notes Extra notes about this keyboard that may be of interest or are important to know. |
Also branded as the IBM ThinkPad Numeric Keypad Option |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM Mobile Systems Hardware Maintenance Manual Volume 2 (#S82G-1502-03) [source: IBM] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8101 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8102 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss German |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8113 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8114 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swiss French |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8115 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Italian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8128 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Swedish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8129 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Dutch |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8130 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Spanish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8131 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Danish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8132 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Belgian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8133 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Norwegian |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8134 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Arabic |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8135 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Hebrew |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8136 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Portuguese |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |
| Part NumberPart Number The number used to describe this keyboard's specific release; usually specific for a target region, language or SKU, etc. |
29H8137 |
| TypeType A designation from my own type naming scheme used to categorise this keyboard with or from others by their common features and market intent but may/may not be derived from official names. |
Model M6-1 Type V Laptop Keyboard Assembly |
| OEMOEM Possible companies responsible for making this keyboard for the company marketing it. |
Lexmark, Key Tronic |
| Key-switchesKey-switches The name of the known switching mechanism that lies under this keyboard's keys. |
IBM buckling rubber sleeves (M6 slider-actuated type) |
| Earliest AppearanceEarliest Appearance The year (and possibly the quarter) that this keyboard part number was introduced, first observed, first recorded or the first example found. |
1995 Q3 |
| Casing ColourCasing Colour The original colour of this keyboard's outer casing. For keyboards whose casing materials are known to yellow, this will refer to the original colour before such transformation occurs. |
Raven (Stealth) Black |
| BrandingBranding The possible branding and logo styles found on this keyboard part number. This could be multiple styles at once or possible styles found over time. |
None |
| ConnectionConnection The keyboard-to-host connection. This is could be a description of a cable (its colour, whether its coiled, whether its detachable, and what connector is at its end) or the name of a wireless technology. |
Integrated |
| Form FactorForm Factor The standardised or universally acknowledged name for this keyboard's layout form factor. |
Tenkeyless (compacted) |
| Layout/LanguageLayout/LanguageThe original regional/language layout this keyboard was configured as. Both the language and the standardised key layout may be listed, and in the case of both being known or defined, it will be styled as language then standard. |
Turkish |
| Built-In MouseBuilt-In Mouse Possible pointing devices this keyboard could carry. This could be a brand name, name of the sensor technology behind it, or a generic description in lieu of the former details. |
TrackPoint III strain gauge pointing stick |
| Source(s)Source(s) Documents ("Doc"), websites and/or webpages ("Web") that were used as a source of information for this keyboard part number. Examples of this keyboard part number I own ("ASK") will also be included as sources. |
Doc: IBM ThinkPad Power Series 850 Hardware Maintenance Manual (#S30H-2383-00) [source: OS/2 Museum (M. Necasek)] |